manualshive.com logo in svg

LG P895, User Manual

Introducing the LG P895 - a sleek and powerful smartphone designed to keep you connected. Get started quickly with the included Quick Start Manual, providing easy-to-follow instructions on setting up your device. For a detailed understanding of its features and functionalities, download the comprehensive user manual for free from manualshive.com.

Share
Download
background image

133

Accessories

These accessories are available for use with the LG-P895. 

(Items described below may be optional.)

Travel adaptor

Stereo 
headset

Micro-
USIM Slot 
Pin

Data cable

Connect your 
LG-P895 and 
PC.

User Guide

Learn more 
about your 
LG-P895.

LG Tag+

Rubberdium™ 
Pen

Summary of Contents for P895

Page 1: ...User Guide LG P895 MFL67684824 1 0 W ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ LG P895 MFL67684824 1 0 W www lg com www lg com ENGLISH ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ENGLISH ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...ﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻪ ﺍ ً ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ Copyright 2012 LG Electronics Inc LG Group ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ LG ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ LG ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ YouTube ﻭ Gmail ﻭ Google Maps ﻭ Google ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ Play ﺳﻮﻕ ﻭ Google Talk ﻭ Google Inc ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ...

Page 4: ...ﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 41 ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ 42 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ 43 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ 44 ﺍ ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ 44 ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ 45 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ 48 ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ 49 ﻠﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ 50 Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ 51 ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 51 Wi Fi 51 Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ 52 ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 54 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ 56 ﻭﺗﺄﻣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ...

Page 5: ... ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ 64 ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ 65 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ 65 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء 66 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ 66 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 69 ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء 69 ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ 69 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 70 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ 70 ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ 72 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ 72 ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ 73 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ 73 ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 74 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ...

Page 6: ... ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 80 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ 81 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 85 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ 85 ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺩ ّ ﺪ ﻣﺤ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ 86 ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 86 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺪ 87 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 88 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ 89 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ 92 ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ 92 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ 92 ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ 93 ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ 94 ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻞ ّ ﻐ ﻣﺸ USB ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ 94 ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ...

Page 7: ...ﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ 101 LG SmartWorld ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ 102 ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ 102 ّﻪ ﺒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﺿﺒﻂ 102 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 103 ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ 103 ﻣﻬﺎﻡ 104 Polaris Office 105 FileShare 105 ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ 106 ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ 107 ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ 107 ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ 110 ﻭﻳﺐ 110 ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ 110 ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 111 ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ...

Page 8: ...8 ﺷﺨﺼﻲ 120 ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ 122 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ 124 DivX HD 125 DTS 125 Dolby Mobile 126 LG ﻣﻦ On Screen Phone 126 On Screen Phone ﺭﻣﻮﺯ 126 On Screen Phone ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ On Screen Phone ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ 127 ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 128 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ 130 ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ...

Page 9: ... ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ّﻤﺔ ﻤ ﻣﺼ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ SAR ﺩ ّ ﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ SAR ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻨﻔﺬ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ LG ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻃﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ SAR ﺽ ّ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ...

Page 10: ...ﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻢ 1 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻢ 1 5 ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ً ّﺎ ﻴ ﻧﻮﻋ ً ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺐ ّ ﻳﺘﻄﻠ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ّ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ً ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ُ...

Page 11: ...ﻚ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻘﻨﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻟـ ً ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ً ﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ LG ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﺓ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺇ...

Page 12: ...ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ً ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺪ ﺇﺫ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﺤﻦ ﻻ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺽ ّ ﺗﻌﺮ ﻻ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻀﻊ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ...

Page 13: ...ﺍﻡ ﺳﻮء ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﺠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻥ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﺠﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﺠﻔﻒ ﺃﻭ ...

Page 14: ...ﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻗﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ً ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻻ ً ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ً ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻒ ّ ﺗﻮﻗ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ RF ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﻳﻮ...

Page 15: ...ﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺴﻤﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ً ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﺪﺛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﻻ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻟﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻦ ﱡ ﺗﻤﻜ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﺼﺖ ﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ...

Page 16: ... ﺘ ﺗ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺙ ّﺐ ﺒ ﺗﺘﺴ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻃﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻪ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﻃ...

Page 17: ...ﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﺴﺖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻭﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ LG ﻓﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ LG ﻭﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ّﻤﺔ ﻤ ﻣﺼ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻻ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ...

Page 18: ...ﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻌﺔ ّ ﻨ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺺ ّ ﺗﺘﺨﻠ ﻻ ً ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ LG ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻭﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ Electronics ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ً ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻗﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ...

Page 19: ...ﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ 50 ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ 45 ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ 10 ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ MPL ﻭ LGPL ﻭ GPL ﻟـ ﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻘ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﻳ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ http opensource lge com ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﻼء ﻭﺇﺷ...

Page 20: ...ﺤﻘﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺬﺍ 10 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ 2 ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ 3 ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ 2 ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍ...

Page 21: ...ﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻨﺬ ...

Page 22: ... ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ٍ ﺬ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ 4 ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻌﺔ ّ ﻨ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ُﻠﻐﻰ ﻳ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻞ ّ ﺗﻌﻄ ﻓﻲ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ...

Page 23: ...ﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 5 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍء PIN ﻟـ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ PIN ﻟـ ...

Page 24: ...ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺭ ّ ﺗﻌﺬ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻫﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻚ ُﻄﻠﺐ ﻳ ٍ ﺬ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ PIN ﻟـ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻔﻴ...

Page 25: ... ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭﻧﺴﻴﺖ Google PIN ﻟـ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 6 ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻌﺔ ّ ﻨ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ 1 ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ 2 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 LG ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ٍ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ 4 Android ﻧﻈﺎﻡ...

Page 26: ...ﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﺘﺢ 7 Android ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ً ﺳﻬﻼ ﺍ ً ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍ ً ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ Android ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﻠﺔ ًﺍ ﺮ ﻣﺆﺧ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤ...

Page 27: ...ﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ Wi Fi ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ LG PC Suite ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ...

Page 28: ...ﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ LG P895 LG P895 ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻻﺋﻞ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﻭ LG PC Suite ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ WINDOWS PC Sync ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ LG PC Suite ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ LG PC ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ Suite ﺑﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﺖ 32 Windows XP ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ Windows Vista ﻭ Service pack 2 ﺑﺖ 64 ﺑ...

Page 29: ... ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻗﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ 100 ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ء ﺑﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻢ LG ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ Windows Media Player 10 ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ LG ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ USB ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ LG ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ USB ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ً ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ LG ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ LG PC Suite ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ...

Page 30: ...ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ 2 ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ 3 ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ 4 ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺯﺭ USB ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ 10 ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ LG ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ PC Suite LG PC ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء Suite 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ...

Page 31: ...ﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺴﺦ 5 ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺪﺩ 6 ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻤﻞ 11 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ًﺎ ﻣ ﺗﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ٍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ LG P895 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻗﺪ ﺇﺫ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣ...

Page 32: ...ﺠ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ 12 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﺪﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ٍ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 10 ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ...

Page 33: ...ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ Google ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ Search ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ...

Page 34: ...ﺗﺤﺴﺲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻳﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺷﻲء ﻭﺿﻊ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﺪ LCD ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﻮﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺒﻘﺔ LCD ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ...

Page 35: ...ﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ USB ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ MHL ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ QuickMemo ﻟـ ...

Page 36: ...34 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ Flash ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ...

Page 37: ...ء QuickMemo ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء 1 Quick ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ Memo ﻟـ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ QuickMemo ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺤﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﺸﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ...

Page 38: ... ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ QuickMemo ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ QuickMemo ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻻ ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ QuickMemo ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻬﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ QuickMemo ﻋﺮﺽ QuickMemo ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ...

Page 39: ...ro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ 1 Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ّ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ 2 Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ...

Page 40: ...38 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌ ...

Page 41: ... ﺃﻱ ﺐ ّ ﻨ ﻟﺘﺠ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺣﺪﻙ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ...

Page 42: ...ﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺹ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ 30 ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻧﻘﺶ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺭ ّ ﺗﻌﺬ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ 5 ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺸﻠﺖ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻨﻚ ُﻄﻠﺐ ﻴ ﺳ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺶ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠ...

Page 43: ... ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﻪ ﺳﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺭ ّ ﻭﺣﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻻ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻑ ّ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ٍ ﻛﺎﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺱ ...

Page 44: ... ﺳﻬﻼ ً ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ًﺎ ﻣ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺓ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ...

Page 45: ... ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 1 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 2 ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻭﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ 3 ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ً ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ...

Page 46: ...ﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ً ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 2 ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻭﻣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ GPS ﺃﻭ NFC ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ Wi Fi ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ...

Page 47: ...ﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ...

Page 48: ...ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺇﺳﻜﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ NFC ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ...

Page 49: ... ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ GPS GPS ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ Gmail ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ Google talk ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻧﺸﻂ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ...

Page 50: ...ﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً ﻣﻄﻮﻻ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ...

Page 51: ...ّ ﻜ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺒﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ á ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ á ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ُﻈﻬﺮ ﻳ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻜﺒﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ً ﻣﻄﻮﻻ a ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺩ ّ ﺪ ﺣ ﺛﻢ ...

Page 52: ...ﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺩ Gmail ﻣﺜﻞ Google ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ Google ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻙ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺇﻥ ﻣﺎ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ Google ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ Gmail ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ Gmail ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮ...

Page 53: ...ﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻭﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍ ً ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ Wi Fi ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻹﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ Wi Fi ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ Wi Fi ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗ...

Page 54: ...ﺍﻟ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ 5 Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ Wi Fi ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍ ً ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ...

Page 55: ...ﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍ ً ﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ 2 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺎ ً ﻣﺴﺤ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺎﺗﻬﺎ ّ ُﻌﺮ ﻣ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎ...

Page 56: ...ﻲ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ Wi fi ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB ﻋﺒﺮﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ Wi Fi ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻭﻛﺈﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ...

Page 57: ...ﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ Windows 7 ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻓﻠﻦ Ubuntu ﻣﺜﻞ Linux ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ Windows ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ ﺍ ً ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ USB ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻟﻪ ﻳﺘﺴﻨﻰ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ http www android com tether ...

Page 58: ...ﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ SSID ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ WPA2 2 ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ً ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ WPA2 PSK ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ Wi Fi ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬ...

Page 59: ...ﺎﻳﺔ Wi Fi ﺑﺚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Android ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ Wi Fi Direct ﻭ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺎ ً ﻣﺴﺒﻘ Wi Fi Direct ﻭ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Wi Fi Direct ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ 2 Wi Fi Direct ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ...

Page 60: ...ﺎﺯ SmartShare ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء Wi Fi Direct ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ Wi Fi 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ Wi Fi Direct ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍ ً ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ Wi Fi ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻦ ّ ﻳﻤﻜ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻷ...

Page 61: ...martShare ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ DLNA ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ SmartShare ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ SmartShare 2 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ً ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻜﺸﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻦ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘ...

Page 62: ...ﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ DLNA ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ SmartShare ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ 4 ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟ...

Page 63: ...ﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء 1 ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺣﺎﻟ SmartShare ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ DLNA ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻨﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻟﻦ DLNA ﻣﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ DMP ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ...

Page 64: ...ﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺎ ً ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ SmartShare 2 ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ...

Page 65: ...63 ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺘﺒﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺪﺩ 5 ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻨﺔ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻻ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻦ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ DMS ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ DLNA ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ...

Page 66: ...ﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺢ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ 2 ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻓﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺮﺩ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﻓﺾ ﻭﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ...

Page 67: ...ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء 1 ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍ ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﻃﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء 2 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ﻣﻌﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ 3 ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ...

Page 68: ... ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﻛﻞ ّﻦ ﻤ ﺗﺘﻀ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻭﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ...

Page 69: ...ﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺭﻓﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺭﻓﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ...

Page 70: ...ﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜ...

Page 71: ...ﻤﺎء ﻟﻔﺘﺢ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ 2 ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻓﺎﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ 2 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 4 5 ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ...

Page 72: ... 2 ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ً ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ CSV ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺑﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ 1 LG PC Suite ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻗﻢ ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ً ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ Android ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ...

Page 73: ...ﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﺣﺪﺩ 5 ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ Windows Explorer 6 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ 7 ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ 8 ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ LG PC Suite 9 ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ...

Page 74: ... ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 2 ﺃﺣﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻔﺮﺽ ُ ﺳﺘ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ 4 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ 5 ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋ...

Page 75: ...ﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ SMS ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﺮﺽ MMS ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ MMS ﻭ SMS ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ...

Page 76: ...ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ LG P895 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻟﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺎ ً ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 1 ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ...

Page 77: ...ﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﺿﻔﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼ...

Page 78: ...ﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺗﻚ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ً ّﻻ ﻮ ﻣﻄ ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ...

Page 79: ... ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﺎ ً ﻧ ﻋﻨﻮﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 2 ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻘﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 3 ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺺ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ 4 5 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼ...

Page 80: ...78 ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ً ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﺳﺘﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ...

Page 81: ... ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ HDR ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 82: ... 4 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺰ ّ ﺗﺮﻛ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ 5 ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ Google ﻭ Gmail ﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ Picasa ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﻤﺖ SNS ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻣﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﺒﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ SNS ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛـ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ...

Page 83: ...ﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ...

Page 84: ...ﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺳﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ً ﻟﻴﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ISO ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ً ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ISO ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻘﺪ...

Page 85: ... ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺍ ً ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ٍ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻢ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ GPS ﺍﻟﻼﻗﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ً ﺪ ﻭﺍﺣ ﺣﺪﺩ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ًﺎ ﻌ ﺳﺮﻳ ً ﺩﻟﻴﻼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟ...

Page 86: ...ﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻦ ّ ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 87: ...ﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍ ً ﻣﺆﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 88: ... ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ً ﺓ ﻣﺮ 4 ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺿﻮء ﻳﻈﻬﺮ 5 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 6 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ Google ﺃﻭ Gmail ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ YouTube ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮ...

Page 89: ...ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ...

Page 90: ... ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻟﻠﺘﻮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ًﺎ ﻌ ﺳﺮﻳ ً ﺩﻟﻴﻼ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ...

Page 91: ...89 ﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ 1 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ...

Page 92: ...ﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺛﻢ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ...

Page 93: ...ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ...

Page 94: ...ﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﺎ ً ﻣﺆﻗﺘ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ٍ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 10 ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ٍ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ 10 ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ...

Page 95: ...ﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ...

Page 96: ...ﻮﺗﺮ 1 LG P895 ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ 2 LG Android ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ Platform Driver ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺛﻢ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ MTP ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 3 ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ 2 ﺃﻏﺎ...

Page 97: ... ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ...

Page 98: ...ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺑﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ LG Tag LG Tag ﻫﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﻆ LG Tag ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ NFC ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ّﻨﺔ ﻴ ﻣﻌ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ Tag writing ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 1 LG ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ Tag ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ 2 ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ...

Page 99: ...ﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ 2 ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺎ ً ﻭﻓﻘ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ 2 ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ MHL ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ًﺎ ﻴ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪ...

Page 100: ...ﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺩﻓﺘﺮ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء 2 ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء 3 ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ...

Page 101: ...ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ Gmail ﻋﺒﺮ Google ﻭ Picasa ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ...

Page 102: ... ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ World ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻑ ّ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ 2 ﻟﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ LG SmartWorld ﺑـ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻦ LG SmartWorld ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻗﻢ 3 ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺠﺪ ﻟﻢ ﻟﻮ ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 1 LG SmartWorld ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ www lgworld com LG SmartWorld ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻗﻢ 2 ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻗﻢ 3 ﻋﺒ...

Page 103: ... ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺟﺮﺏ ًﺎ ﻌ ﺳﺮﻳ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻑ ّ ُﻌﺮ ﻤ ﺍﻟ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻲ LG SmartWorld ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻻ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻗﻞ ...

Page 104: ... ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺳﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ 1 ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ 2 ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ 3 ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑـ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍ ً ﺪ ﺗﻌﻘﻴ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ 4 ﺃﻭ cos ﺃﻭ sin ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ...

Page 105: ...ﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺛﻢ 5 ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻞ ِ ﻭﺃﺩﺧ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺣﺪﺛﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ 6 ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ 7 ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺩﻋﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ 8 ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ MS ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Exchange MS Office Outlook ﺃﻭ MS Outlook ﻓﻲ Web Access MS Exchange ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ 1 ﺍﻟﻤ...

Page 106: ...ﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻲ PowerPoint ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ Polaris ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ Office ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ Polaris Office ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻈﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ Adobe PDF ﻭ Microsoft Office ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮ...

Page 107: ... ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ LG ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ LG ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ LG P895 ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺎ ً ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠ...

Page 108: ...ﻛﻲ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ 1 ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ 2 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ 3 ﺛﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ 4 ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍ...

Page 109: ...ﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ 3 ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ 4 ﺣﺪﺩ ﺛﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟ...

Page 110: ... ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﻳ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﺘﺤﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﺐ ﺍ ً ُﺸﻔﺮ ﻣ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ 4 ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ 5 ﻧﻌﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ً ﻣﺘﺼﻼ USB ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍ...

Page 111: ...ﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ...

Page 112: ...ﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ً ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﻣﺎ ﻭﻫﻮ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻗﻠﺒﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ...

Page 113: ...ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ Google ﻭ Gmail ﻭ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻛﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ...

Page 114: ... Wi Fi ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ Wi Fi ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ Wi Fi MAC ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻳﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻓﻘﺪ MAC ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ LG P895 ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ MAC ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ MAC ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ Wi Fi ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ MAC ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ...

Page 115: ... ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ Wi Fi Direct ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ً ﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ Wi Fi ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ Wi Fi ﻧﻘﻄﺔ Wi Fi ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ Wi Fi ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ LG P895 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻥ NFC ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ NFC ﺗﺸﻴﺮ NFC ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ّﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺰ ﺫﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﻟﻜ...

Page 116: ... ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ NFC ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ NFC ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ً ﻣﻌﻄﻼ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ NFC ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ Android ﻣﺘﻌﺔ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﺮ ً ﺓ ﻋﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ NFC ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ Android ﻣﺘﻌﺔ ﻭ NFC ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ VPN ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺎ...

Page 117: ...ﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ّﻪ ﺒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ...

Page 118: ... ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻮء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺘﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎ...

Page 119: ...ﺷﺔ ﻂ ّ ﺗﻨﺸ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻳﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺇﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺈﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻋ...

Page 120: ...ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺃﻡ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻳﺰﻳﻠﻪ ﻻ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺪ...

Page 121: ... ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ Google ﻭﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ Google ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ Micro ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ SIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ Micro ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ PIN ﺭﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ USIM USIM ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ CA ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ...

Page 122: ...ﺑﻚ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﻣﻨﻚ ُﻄﻠﺐ ﻳ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ Android ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭ...

Page 123: ...ﻝ ﺃﻭ MTP ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺤﻦ PTP ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ LG ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ USB USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺄﻝ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ On Screen Phone USB ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺿﻊ PC Suite Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ LG PC Suite ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟـ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ...

Page 124: ...ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ LG ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء USB ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻓ...

Page 125: ...ﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ُﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﻴ ﺳ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ 8 ﺃﻭ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺎ ً ﺃﻳﻀ ًﺎ ﻳ ﻳﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻚ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻗﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻱ Google ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ DRM ﻭﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء LG ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺮﻧ...

Page 126: ...ﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺟﺮ DIVX ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﻮﻝ DivX ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ DivX Certified ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ VOD ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺟﺮﺓ DivX ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ VOD ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ vod divx com ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺣﺘﻰ DivX ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ DivX Certified ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻤﺎ HD 720p ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺒﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ّﺰ ﻴ ﺍﻟﻤﻤ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ DivX Certified ﻭ...

Page 127: ... ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ DTS ﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ DTS ﺇﻥ ﻘﺔ ّ ﻣﻌﻠ DTS 2 0 Digital ﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ّﻦ ﻤ ﻳﺘﻀ DTS Inc ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﻲ Out DTS ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﺬﺍ Inc Dolby Mobile Dolby ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻌﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ Laboratories Dolby Dolby ﻟـ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ D ﺣﺮﻓﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ Laboratories ...

Page 128: ...e ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ On Screen Phone ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ On Screen Phone ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻟﻚ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨ...

Page 129: ... ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻻ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ On Screen Phone ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ SD ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ On Screen Phone ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ 1 www lg com LG Home ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺍ ً ﺪ ﺑﻠ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ 2 OSP ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ LG P895 ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ...

Page 130: ... ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ LG P895 ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ Micro USIM ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ LG P895 ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺮﻑ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺣﻮﻝ LG P895 LG Tag ﻗﻠﻢ Rubberdium ...

Page 131: ...ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ Rubberdium ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻣﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﻳ Rubberdium ﺗﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ...

Page 132: ...ﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ Micro ﺧﻄﺄ USIM ﻓﻲ Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ...

Page 133: ...ﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻪ ّ ﺗﻮﺟ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻞ ّ ﻐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺪﻡ Micro USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ Micro ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍ ً ﺷﻬﺮ 12 6 ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﺮﻉ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﺪﻯ USIM ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ...

Page 134: ...ﺯ ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺒﻞ ِ ﻗ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ّ ﺃﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺮ ّ ﺑﻤﻮﻓ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ...

Page 135: ...USIM ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻓﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻢ ًﺎ ﻣ ﻣﻘﺪ PIN2 ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺭ ّ ﻳﺘﻌﺬ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺗﻢ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺒﺮﻫﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ...

Page 136: ...ﺔ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ّ ﺇﻥ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ً ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻻ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ LG ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ...

Page 137: ...ﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻻ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ SMS ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ...

Page 138: ...ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ً ء ﻏﻄﺎ ﺃﻭ ً ﺷﺮﻳﻄﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻻ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻻ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ...

Page 139: ...137 ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ّﺪ ﻤ ﺗﺠ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ...

Page 140: ......

Page 141: ...ﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺎﺑﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭ LG ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ LG Electronics Inc 2012 ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ LG Group ﺷﺪﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ LG ﺁﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ Talk ﮔﻮﮔﻞ Maps Gmail YouTube ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ Inc ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ Play ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ ...

Page 142: ...ﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 43 ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ 44 ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 45 ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ 46 ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ 46 ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ 47 ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 50 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ 51 ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ 52 ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 53 ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 53 Wi Fi 53 Wi Fi ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ 54 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ 56 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 58 ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ...

Page 143: ... ﺗﻤﺎﺱ 66 ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ 67 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ 67 ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی 68 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ 68 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 71 ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ 71 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی 71 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ 72 ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ 72 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ 74 ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ 74 ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ 75 ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ 76 ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 76 ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ 77 ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ 77 ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ...

Page 144: ...ﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 87 ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ 87 ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ 88 ﻓﻮﺭی ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی 88 ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ 89 ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 90 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 91 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 94 ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ 94 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ 94 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ 96 ﮔﺎﻟﺮی 96 ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ 96 USB ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ 97 ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﭘﺨﺶ 99 LG Tag ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ...

Page 145: ... 106 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 106 ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ 106 ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 107 ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ 108 ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ 108 Polaris Office 109 ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 109 ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ 111 ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ 111 ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ 112 ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ 115 ﻭﺏ 115 ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ 115 ﻭﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 116 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 117 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 117 ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ...

Page 146: ...ﺘﻢ 128 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ 130 DivX HD 131 DTS 132 Dolby Mobile 133 LG On Screen Phone 133 On Screen Phone ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی 133 On Screen Phone ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ On Screen Phone ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ 135 ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ 136 ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ 138 ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ...

Page 147: ...ﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺍی ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﯽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭ ﺳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ SAR ﻫﺎی ﺗﺴﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ SAR ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ...

Page 148: ... ﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﻡ 10 ﮐﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﻭی ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ 1 5 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻤﺮی ﮐﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎی ﺟﻠﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻠﺰی ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ 1 5 ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮ...

Page 149: ...ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﺎی ﺗﮑﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ LG ﺻﻼﺣﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩی ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﯽ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺨﺎﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﮕﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻧﺨ...

Page 150: ...ﻌﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﻍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺸﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎک ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﺛﺎﺛﻴﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻣ...

Page 151: ...ﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﮔﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻋﺎﺩی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ...

Page 152: ...ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺰﺷﮑﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻫﻦ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺟﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ً ﻣﺜﻼ ﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ...

Page 153: ...ک ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻮﺍ ﮐﻴﺴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪی ﻫﺎی ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ...

Page 154: ...ﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﺩی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺷﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺍی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺸﮑﻨﻨﺪ ﺍی ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺭ...

Page 155: ...ﺤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﯽ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴ...

Page 156: ...ﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑ...

Page 157: ...ﺮی ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ً ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﺁﻥ ﺍﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﺍ ...

Page 158: ...ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﻧﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻴﺰی ﻧﻮک ﺷﯽء ﻫﻴﭻ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺯی ﺁﺗﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ LG Electronics ﺑﺪﻳﻨﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ LG P895 ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ EC 1999 5 ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺻﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭙﯽ http www lg com global support cedoc RetrieveProductCeDOC jsp ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑ...

Page 159: ... 45 ﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ 10 ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ GPL ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮐﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ LGPL MPL ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﺯ http opensource lge com ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﺐ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮐﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﻴﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ...

Page 160: ...ﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﻓﻀﺎی ﺗﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 2 ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 3 ﻧﺼﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ 2 ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍ...

Page 161: ...ﻮﺵ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺻﺪی ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮐﻨ...

Page 162: ...ﺐ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 3 ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ 4 ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫ...

Page 163: ...ﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 5 ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ...

Page 164: ...ﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 30 ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺎ PIN ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺭ 5 ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺍ...

Page 165: ...ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 6 ﺑﺮﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 1 2 ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ 3 LG ﺁﺭﻡ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ...

Page 166: ...ﺾ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ 7 ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻳﮏ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ...

Page 167: ...ﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ LG PC ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ 8 Suite ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ LG PC Suite ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ Wi Fi ﻭ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ LG PC Suite ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﭼﻨ...

Page 168: ... LG PC ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ Suite LG PC Suite ﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ LG PC Suite ﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی LG ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ 1 www lg com ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 2 ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ LG P895 ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ LG ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ LG P895 ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ 3 ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫ...

Page 169: ...s 7 32 bit 64 bit ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ 1 ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻧﺪﻩ CPU ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ RAM ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ 512 ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ 768 1024 ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺖ 32 ﺭﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ 100 ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﻓﻀﺎی HDD ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﻓﻀﺎی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ LG ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ Windows Media Player 10 LG ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ USB ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ LG ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧ...

Page 170: ...ﻩ Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ USB ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ 3 Personal information ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ 4 ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ Sync ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ 10 USB ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ LG PC suite ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ USB ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍﻳ...

Page 171: ... ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ 5 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ 6 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ 11 ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ LG P895 ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﺧﺮﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺖ...

Page 172: ...ﺍ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ 12 ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ 10 ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ...

Page 173: ...ﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ Search ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ...

Page 174: ...ﻃﻮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﻤﺪی ﺷﺪﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ LCD ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ LCD ﻧﻮﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ...

Page 175: ...ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ USB ﭘﻮﺭﺕ MHL ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺟﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻓﻮﺭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ...

Page 176: ...36 ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﯽ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﻨﺪﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ...

Page 177: ...ﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ 1 ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ 2 ﮐﻦ ﭘﺎک ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 3 ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ...

Page 178: ...QuickMenu ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ...

Page 179: ... ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ 1 ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ 2 ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﻼﻳﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ...

Page 180: ...ﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ً ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ...

Page 181: ...ﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺎ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﻗﻔﻞ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔ...

Page 182: ... ﺑﻮﺩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﺎ PIN ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ 30 ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ 5 ﻫﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﻌﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺑﺎﺭ 5 ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﺍ...

Page 183: ... ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻮک ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ...

Page 184: ...ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﮏ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ...

Page 185: ...ﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ 1 ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺩﺭ 2 ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ 3 ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎ...

Page 186: ... ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩی 2 ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی Wi Fi ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک NFC GPS ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ...

Page 187: ... ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ً ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ...

Page 188: ... ﺷﺪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻦ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ NFC ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ...

Page 189: ...ﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ GPS GPS ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ Gmail Talk ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ...

Page 190: ...ﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ...

Page 191: ...ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﮐﺴﺎﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی á ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﻧﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻧﺴﻮی ﺭﺍ a ﮐﻠﻴﺪ á ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺎی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ...

Page 192: ... ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ Gmail ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎی Gmail ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴ...

Page 193: ...ﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ Wi Fi ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ Wi Fi ﻳﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ Wi Fi ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠ...

Page 194: ... ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ 4 ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ 5 Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﺩی ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ Wi Fi ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ...

Page 195: ...ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ 2 ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ...

Page 196: ... ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻭ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﻳﮏ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﻫ...

Page 197: ...ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Wi Fi ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ Windows 7 ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﺳﺖ Ubuntu ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ Linux ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯی ﻳﺎ Windows ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ USB ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ...

Page 198: ...ﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 4 Wi Fi ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی Wi Fi ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ SSID ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ Wi Fi ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ Wi Fi Protected ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻭ Access 2 WPA2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی PSK ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ WPA2 PSK ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑ...

Page 199: ...ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ Wi Fi Cast ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ Wi Fi Direct ﻭ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ Wi Fi Direct ﻭ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ 1 ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ Wi Fi Direct ...

Page 200: ...ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺹ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ SmartShare ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ Wi Fi Direct ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ Wi Fi ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﺍ 1 ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ Wi Fi Direct ﻫﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺻﺎﺣﺐ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ...

Page 201: ...ﺁﻭﺭی ﻓﻦ ﺍﺯ SmartShare ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ DLNA ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ SmartShare ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 1 SmartShare ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ 3 ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ...

Page 202: ... ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻨﮏ 5 SmartShare ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ DLNA ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ 1 SmartShare ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍ...

Page 203: ...ﺨﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ 1 ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ SmartShare ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 2 ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ...

Page 204: ...ﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی 1 SmartShare ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ 3 ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ 4 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳ...

Page 205: ...ﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ 3 ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺑﻨﺪﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ 4 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ 5 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ DLNA ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ DMS ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ...

Page 206: ... ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ 2 ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی 3 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧ...

Page 207: ... ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ 1 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺮ 3 ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ...

Page 208: ... ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺭ...

Page 209: ...ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﻪ ...

Page 210: ...ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ID ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ...

Page 211: ...ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ 3 ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻳﮏ 4 ﮐﻨﻴ...

Page 212: ...ﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﯽ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭼﭗ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ 3 ﻭ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﮐﺴﺘﺮی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ CSV ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍﻳ...

Page 213: ...ﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ Windows Explorer ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ 5 ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Windows Explorer ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ 6 ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ 7 ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ 8 ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ LG PC Suite ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ 9 ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﻭی ...

Page 214: ...ﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩی ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ 3 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ 4 ﻫﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣ...

Page 215: ...ﺘﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍی ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ١۶٠ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ SMS ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ SMS ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ SMS ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ MMS ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍی ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻪ SMS MMS ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮی ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﯽ ...

Page 216: ...ﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ LG P895 ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ 1 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ...

Page 217: ... ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺎﺩﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی...

Page 218: ... ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭼﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ...

Page 219: ...ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻫﺎی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺩﺭﺳﯽ 2 ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺎی ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﮔﻮﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ...

Page 220: ...ﺎﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﻮﺍﭘﻴﻤﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻮﻗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ...

Page 221: ...ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻤﺎ HDR ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ...

Page 222: ... ﻣﯽ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ 4 ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮژﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ 5 ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ Gmail ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ Social ﻭ Picasa ﺷﻮﺩ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ SNS ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻳﮏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ...

Page 223: ...ﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ...

Page 224: ...ی ﻭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﮕﻮﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺎﺗﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻤﺎ HDR ﻋﺎﺩی ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺻﯽ...

Page 225: ... ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻨﺮی ﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎﺑ...

Page 226: ... ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺳﻔﻴﺪی ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮی ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻧﻤﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼ...

Page 227: ... ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﺩﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ...

Page 228: ... ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭼﺸﻤﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﻻی ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻳﮏ 5 ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 6 ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻟﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ YouTube ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳ...

Page 229: ...ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﻣﻠﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮی ﻭ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻟﻨﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ...

Page 230: ...ﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗ...

Page 231: ...91 ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ 1 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ 2 ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ...

Page 232: ...ﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍی ﻫﻤﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺒﮏ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﻠﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠ...

Page 233: ...ﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺎی ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ...

Page 234: ...ﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ 2 ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ١٠ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ١٠ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨ...

Page 235: ...ﻮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻢ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ...

Page 236: ...ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ USB ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ 1 USB ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ LG P895 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ 2 Platform Driver ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ LG ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ MTP ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ 3 ﺩﻫﻴ...

Page 237: ...ﻒ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ...

Page 238: ... ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺬﻑ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺗﮑﺜﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺧﺬ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺗﮑﺜﻴﺮ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻣﻠﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺣﻖ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ...

Page 239: ... 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﮓ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ NFC ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ 3 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ Tag ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ 2 ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...

Page 240: ...ﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ 2 ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ MHL ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ...

Page 241: ... ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 2 ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﺪ 3 ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ OK ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ...

Page 242: ...ﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ Social ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ Gmail ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ Picasa ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻦ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ...

Page 243: ... ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺪ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺯ LG SmartWorld ﺑﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ LG ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ SmartWorld ﺭﻣﺰ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻭی 2 ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ LG SmartWorld ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ LG SmartWorld ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺯﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی 3 LG SmartWorld ...

Page 244: ...ﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ 3 LG ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ 4 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ SmartWorld LG SmartWorld ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ LG SmartWorld ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺮﻓﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﺜﻼ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻠ...

Page 245: ...ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ LG SmartWorld ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﮐﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ...

Page 246: ...ﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺯﻝ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ 1 ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭ...

Page 247: ...ﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎی ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی 2 ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩی ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﯽ ﺭﻭی 3 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 4 ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 5 ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ 6 ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ 7 ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮ...

Page 248: ...ﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ 1 ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 2 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی 3 ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ Microsoft Exchange ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ 4 Polaris Office office ﺍی ﺣﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﮏ Polaris Office ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ office ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ PowerPoint ﻭ Word Excel ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠ...

Page 249: ... PDF ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ Polaris Office ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک 1 ﺭﺍ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﻧﻮﻉ 2 ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﻨﺎﺩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ...

Page 250: ...ی ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ LG P895 ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔ...

Page 251: ... ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ 4 ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ 2 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨ...

Page 252: ... ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ 1 ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﮏ 2 ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ 3 ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ...

Page 253: ... ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ USB ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ...

Page 254: ...ﻑ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻳﺰی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ...

Page 255: ...ﺱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻭﺏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻢ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪی ﭘﻨ...

Page 256: ...ﺘﺮﺍک Gmail ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ Social ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻞﮔﻮﮔ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺮﻭ...

Page 257: ...ﻨﻈﻴﻢ Wi Fi ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی Wi Fi Wi Fi ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ Wi Fi ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ MAC ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ MAC ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ MAC ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎی ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ LG P895 ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ MAC ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ Wi Fi ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ MAC ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ...

Page 258: ... ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ Wi Fi ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ Wi Fi ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﭙﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺭﺍ Wi Fi ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﮏ LG P895 ﮔﻮﺷﯽ NFC ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ NFC ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ NFC ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻓﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐ...

Page 259: ...ﺍی NFC ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ NFC ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎ Beam ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ NFC ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺪﻳﻭﺭﺪﻧﺁ Beam ﻫﻢ ﻭ NFC ﻫﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻣﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﯽ VPN ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ...

Page 260: ... ﻣﯽ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳ...

Page 261: ...ﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻧﻮﻉ ...

Page 262: ...ﻪ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﯽ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺍی ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﮐﺪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺮ...

Page 263: ...ﯽ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﮐﺘﯽ ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍژﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍژﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍژﮔﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ...

Page 264: ... ﺑﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻮﻳﯽ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ Wi Fi ﻭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﮔﻮﮔﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ...

Page 265: ...ﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﻔﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ CA ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪی ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭ...

Page 266: ...ﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﺪﺭﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺗ...

Page 267: ... ﻳﺎ LG ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ USB ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ PTP ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ USB ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ On Screen Phone ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ USB ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ Wi Fi LG ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ PC Suite ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ Wi Fi ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ PC Suite LG PC ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﻳﺪ Wi Fi ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ Wi Fi ...

Page 268: ... ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮی ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ LG ﺩﻫﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ً ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ...

Page 269: ... OTA ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ USB ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ LG ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺷﻮﺩ 4 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 1 ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﮐﻮﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ 8 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ...

Page 270: ...ﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ LG ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ DivX HD ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ DIVX VIDEO DivX ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ DivX LLC ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ Rovi Corporation ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺮﮐﺖ DivX ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ DivX ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ Certified ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋ...

Page 271: ...X ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی DivX Certified ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ 720p ﺗﻔﮑﻴﮏ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺁﺭﻡ ﻭ DivX DivX Certified ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻭ Rovi Corporation ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻪ ﻫﺎی DTS ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ 5 974 380 5 956 674 ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺯﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭ 6 487 535 DTS ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ DTS ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎ DTS ﻭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ DTS Inc ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ 2 ...

Page 272: ...132 Dolby Mobile Dolby ﻟﻴﺴﺎﻧﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ D ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻭ Laboratories Dolby ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ Dolby Laboratories ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ...

Page 273: ...en Phone ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ LG Home Panorama ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﺧﺎﺭﺝ On Screen Phone ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺰﺭگ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ On Screen Phone ﻫﺎی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ LG...

Page 274: ...ﻠﻢ ﻫﺎ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ Polaris Office ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻫﺎ On Screen Phone ﻣﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ SD ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟ...

Page 275: ...ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺪ 1 LG Home www lg com ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ 2 OSP ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ LG P895 ﺗﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ On Screen Phone a ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ On Screen Phone ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ...

Page 276: ... ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ LG P895 ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺗﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ Micro USIM ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭ LG P895 ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮی LG P895 ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮐﺴﺐ LG Tag ﻗﻠﻢ Rubberdium ...

Page 277: ...ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ Rubberdium ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ Rubberdium ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﻧﮑﺸﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻴﺰ ﻧﻮک ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺑﺎ ﻭ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ...

Page 278: ... ﺍﻣﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺧﻄﺎی Micro USIM ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ Micro USIM ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ Micro USIM ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ...

Page 279: ...ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ 6 ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ Micro USIM ﻋﻤﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ Micro USIM ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ 12 ﺗﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮑﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ...

Page 280: ...ﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮐﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺪ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺪی ﺩﻭ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺍی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ...

Page 281: ...ﺭﺍﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﻄﺎی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ Micro USIM ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ PIN 2 ...

Page 282: ...ﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ...

Page 283: ...ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺳﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺐ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ LG ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ...

Page 284: ...ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ SMS ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ...

Page 285: ... ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻴﻒ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺣﺴﮕﺮ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻴﺼﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ...

Page 286: ...146 ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻞ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻋﻴﺐ ...

Page 287: ...handset is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due to the touch screen keyboard Copyright 2012 LG Electronics Inc All rights reserved LG and the LG logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Google Google Maps Gmail YouTube Google Talk and Play Store are trademarks of Google Inc ENGLISH ...

Page 288: ...your lock screen 40 Your Home screen 43 Touch screen tips 43 Home 44 Customising the Home screen 45 Returning to recently used applications 46 Notification drawer 46 Viewing the status bar 47 Onscreen keyboard 51 Entering accented letters 51 Google account set up 53 Connecting to Networks and Devices 54 Wi Fi 54 Connecting to Wi Fi networks 54 Bluetooth 55 Sharing your phone s data connection 57 Co...

Page 289: ... contacts 67 Answering and rejecting a call 67 Adjusting call volume 68 Making a second call 68 Viewing your call logs 69 Call settings 69 Contacts 72 Searching for a contact 72 Adding a new contact 72 Favourite contacts 72 Moving contacts from your Old Device to your New Device 73 Messaging 75 Sending a message 75 Threaded box 76 Using Smilies 77 Changing your message settings 77 ...

Page 290: ...er 82 Taking a quick photo 83 Once you ve taken the photo 83 Using the advanced settings 84 Video camera 88 Getting to know the viewfinder 88 Shooting a quick video 89 After shooting a video 89 Using the advanced settings 90 Adjusting the volume when viewing a video 91 Video Wiz 92 Multimedia 95 Video Player 95 Playing a video 95 Gallery 96 Music Player 97 Contents ...

Page 291: ...G SmartWorld 103 How to Get to LG SmartWorld from Your Phone 103 How to use LG SmartWorld 104 Utilities 105 Setting your alarm 105 Using your calculator 105 Adding an event to your calendar 106 Tasks 107 Polaris Office 107 FileShare 108 Backup 108 Back up your smart phone data 110 Scheduling automatic backups 110 Restoring smart phone data 111 The web 114 Internet 114 ...

Page 292: ...RKS 116 DEVICE 119 PERSONAL 123 SYSTEM 125 Phone software update 126 DivX HD 129 DTS 130 Dolby Mobile 130 LG On Screen Phone 131 On Screen Phone icons 131 On Screen Phone features 131 How to install On Screen Phone on your PC 132 Accessories 133 Troubleshooting 135 Contents ...

Page 293: ...guidelines that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons regardless of age and health The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate SAR Tests for SAR are conducted using standardised methods with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands While there may be differences be...

Page 294: ...nst the ear or when positioned at least 1 5 cm away from the body When a carry case belt clip or holder is used for body worn operation it should not contain metal and should position the product at least 1 5 cm away from your body In order to transmit data files or messages this device requires a quality connection to the network In some cases transmission of data files or messages may be delayed...

Page 295: ... a qualified service technician when repair work is required Repairs under warranty at LG s discretion may include replacement parts or boards that are either new or reconditioned provided that they have functionality equal to that of the parts being replaced Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs radios and personal computers The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiat...

Page 296: ... charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become hot and create a fire hazard Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit do not use solvents such as benzene thinner or alcohol Do not charge the phone when it is on soft furnishings The phone should be charged in a well ventilated area Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust Do not keep the phone next to credit ...

Page 297: ...generates heat during normal operation Extremely prolonged direct skin contact in the absence of adequate ventilation may result in discomfort or minor burns Therefore use care when handling your phone during or immediately after operation If your phone gets wet immediately unplug it to dry off completely Do not attempt to accelerate the drying process with an external heating source such as an ov...

Page 298: ... Minor interference may affect TVs radios PCs etc Road safety Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile phones in the area when you drive Do not use a hand held phone while driving Give full attention to driving Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car stereos and...

Page 299: ... damage to your hearing Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long periods of time We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the handset close to your ear We also recommend that music and call volumes are set to a reasonable level When using headphones turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to y...

Page 300: ...il the glass is replaced by an authorised service provider Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress Observe restrictions and follow any regulations or rules Potentially explosive atmospheres Do not use your phone at a refueling point Do not use near fuel or chemicals Do not transport or store flammable gas liquid or explosives in the same compartment of your vehicle as your...

Page 301: ...It includes small parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached Emergency calls Emergency calls may not be available on all mobile networks Therefore you should never depend solely on your phone for emergency calls Check with your local service provider Battery information and care You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging Unlike other battery systems there is no m...

Page 302: ...ity Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity such as in the bathroom Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places as this may deteriorate battery performance There is risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Please recycle when possible Do not dispose as househ...

Page 303: ...ental conditions Make sure that no sharp edged items such as animal s teeth or nails come into contact with the battery This could cause a fire DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby LG Electronics declares that this LG P895 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http www lg com...

Page 304: ...ures Max 50 C discharging 45 C charging Min 10 C Notice Open Source Software To obtain the corresponding source code under GPL LGPL MPL and other open source licences please visit http opensource lge com All referred licence terms disclaimers and notices are available for download with the source code Guidelines for safe and efficient use ...

Page 305: ...and delete some data such as applications or messages to make more memory available To uninstall applications 1 Touch Apps tab Settings Apps from the DEVICE category 2 Once all applications appear scroll to and select the application you want to uninstall 3 Touch Uninstall 2 Optimising battery life Extend your battery s life between charges by turning off features that you don t need to having run...

Page 306: ...lications you have downloaded may reduce battery power To check the battery power level Touch Apps tab Settings About phone from the SYSTEM Battery The battery status charging or not charging and battery level percentage charged is displayed at the top of the screen To monitor and control how battery power is being used Touch Apps tab Settings Power saver from the DEVICE Battery use from the BATTE...

Page 307: ...vices using battery power listed in order from the greatest to smallest amount used 3 Using folders You can combine several app icons in a folder Drop one app icon over another on a home screen and the two icons will be combined 4 Before installing an open source application and OS WARNING If you install and use an OS other than the one provided by the manufacturer it may cause your phone to malfu...

Page 308: ...ted data and settings from the phone 5 Using unlock pattern Set unlock pattern to secure your phone Touch Apps tab Settings Lock screen from DEVICE Select screen lock Pattern This opens a screen that guide you through how to draw a screen unlock pattern You have to create a Backup PIN as a safety measure if you forgot pattern lock Caution Create a Google account before setting an unlock pattern an...

Page 309: ... again after 30 seconds When you can t recall your unlock Pattern PIN or Password If you have forgotten pattern If you logged in to your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times tab the Forgot Pattern button on the bottom of the screen You are then required to log in with your Google Account or you have to enter Backup PIN which you entered while creating Pattern...

Page 310: ...ck Pattern you need to enter Backup PIN 6 Using the hard reset Factory reset If your phone does not restore to the original condition use a Hard Reset Factory Reset to initialise it 1 Turn the power off 2 Press and hold the Power Lock key Volume Down key 3 Once LG Logo appears on the screen release all Keys 4 After some seconds Software allows you to select factory reset function in the Android sy...

Page 311: ...re performing a Hard Reset 7 Opening and switching applications Multitasking is easy with Android because you can keep more than one application running at the same time There s no need to quit an application before opening another Use and switch between several open applications Android manages each application stopping and starting them as needed to ensure that idle applications don t consume re...

Page 312: ... stop it 8 Installing PC Software LG PC Suite LG PC Suite PC Application is a program that helps you connect your device to a PC via an USB cable and Wi Fi Once connected you can use the functions of your device from your PC With your LG PC Suite PC Application You Can Manage and play your media contents music movie pictures on your PC Send multimedia contents to your device Getting to know your p...

Page 313: ...o find out how to use your LG PC Suite PC application Installing LG PC Suite PC Application LG PC Suite PC application can be downloaded from the webpage of LG 1 Go to www lg com and select a country of your choice 2 Go to Support MOBILE SUPPORT LG Mobile Phones Select the Model LG P895 or Go to Support Mobile Phone Support Select the Model LG P895 3 Click PC Sync from MANUALS DOWNLOAD and click D...

Page 314: ...her RAM Graphic card 1024 x 768 resolution 32 bit color or higher HDD 100 MB or more free hard disk space More free hard disk space may be needed depending on the volume of data stored Required software LG integrated drivers Windows Media Player 10 or later NOTE LG Integrated USB Driver LG integrated USB driver is required to connect an LG device and PC and installed automatically when you install...

Page 315: ...USB cable or Wi Fi connection 2 After connection run the program and select the device section from the category on the left side of the screen 3 Click Personal information to select 4 Select the checkbox of contents to synchronise and click the Sync button 10 Synchronising your phone to a computer via USB NOTE To synchronise your phone with your PC using the USB cable you need to install LG PC Su...

Page 316: ...PC and transfer the files 5 Copy the files from your PC to the drive folder 6 Select Charge only option to disconnect the phone To disconnect your phone from the computer Open the notification drawer and touch Charge only to disconnect your phone from the computer safely 11 Hold your phone upright Hold your mobile phone vertically as you would a regular phone The LG P895 has an internal antenna Be c...

Page 317: ...hone where the antenna is located Doing so may affect call quality 12 When the screen freezes If the screen freezes or the phone does not respond when you try to operate it Press and hold the Power Lock key for 10 seconds to turn it off If it still does not work please contact the service centre ...

Page 318: ...st Home key Return to the home screen from any screen Power Lock key Switch your phone on off by pressing and holding this key Short press to lock unlock the screen Menu key Check what options are available Go to Google Search by pressing and holding this key Back key Return to the previous screen Camera lens Earpiece ...

Page 319: ...sing when the phone is near your ear This extends battery life and prevents you from unintentionally activating the touch screen during calls WARNING Placing a heavy object on the phone or sitting on it can damage the LCD and touch screen functions Do not cover the LCD proximity sensor with protective film This could cause the sensor to malfunction ...

Page 320: ...rol ringer volume During a call Control your earpiece volume When playing a track Control volume continuously Micro USIM card slot Power Lock key Charger USB port MHL port Earphone Jack Microphone QuickMemo Hotkey Getting to know your phone ...

Page 321: ...35 Camera lens Speaker Flash WARNING Encloses the battery compartment Please do not open the back cover ...

Page 322: ...picture or on the current phone screen 1 Enter the QuickMemo screen by pressing QuickMemo Hotkey 2 Select the desired menu option from Pen type Colour Eraser and create a memo 3 Touch to Save the memo with the current screen Select the Location whether Notebook or gallery Getting to know your phone ...

Page 323: ...ily use the QuickMenu options Select if you want to use the background screen or not Undo or Redo Select the pen type and the colour Erase the memo that you created Send or share the current QuickMemo to others Save the memo with the current screen Viewing the saved QuickMemo Touch Gallery and select the QuickMemo album or Touch Notebook and select the QuickMemo note ...

Page 324: ...g your new phone you ll need to set it up To insert the Micro USIM card 1 Open the Micro USIM card slot Cover by Pin 2 Slide the Micro USIM card into the Micro USIM card slot Make sure the Gold contact area on the card is facing downwards Getting to know your phone ...

Page 325: ... Charging your phone The charger connector is at the top of the phone Insert the charger and plug it into an electrical outlet NOTE The battery must be fully charged initially to improve battery lifetime ...

Page 326: ... lock screen they may be still running in Lock mode It is recommended that you exit all programs before entering Lock mode to avoid unnecessary charges e g phone calls web access and data communications To wake up your phone press the Power Lock key The lock screen will appear Touch and slide the lock screen in any direction to unlock your home screen The last screen you viewed will open Secure yo...

Page 327: ... PIN or Password NOTE Precautions to take when using pattern lock It is very important to remember the unlock pattern you set You will not be able to access your phone if you use an incorrect pattern 5 times You have 5 opportunities to enter your unlock pattern PIN or password If you have used all 5 opportunities you can try again after 30 seconds ...

Page 328: ... your Google account on the phone but failed to enter the correct pattern 5 times tap the Forgot pattern button You are then required to log in with your Google account to unlock your phone If you have not created a Google account on the phone or you forgot it you have to perform a hard reset ...

Page 329: ... touch and hold it Drag To scroll through a list or move slowly drag across the touch screen Flick To scroll through a list or move quickly flick across the touch screen drag quickly and release NOTE To select an item touch the centre of the icon Do not press too hard the touch screen is sensitive enough to pick up a light firm touch Use the tip of your finger to touch the option you want Be caref...

Page 330: ...he screen Menu icons provide easy one touch access to the functions you use the most Touch the Phone icon to bring up the touch screen dialpad to make a call Touch the Contacts icon to open your contacts Touch the Notebook icon to open your notebook function Touch the Messaging icon to access the messaging menu This is where you can create a new message Touch the Apps icon at the bottom of the scr...

Page 331: ...your home screen 1 Touch and hold the empty part of the home screen Or touch at the top of the right side 2 In the Add Mode menu select items you want to add You will then see added items on the home screen 3 Drag it to the location you want and lift your finger To remove an item from the home screen Home screen touch and hold the icon you want to remove drag it to TIP To add an application icon to...

Page 332: ...ntly 2 Touch an icon to open the application Or touch the Back key to return to your previous screen Notification drawer The notification drawer runs across the top of your screen Touch and slide the notification drawer down with your finger Touch to manage the Notifications Here you can check and manage Sound profile Wi Fi Bluetooth NFC GPS Accounts sync ...

Page 333: ...ses different icons to display phone information such as signal strength new messages battery life active Bluetooth and data connections Below is a table explaining the meaning of icons you re likely to see in the status bar Icon Description No Micro USIM card No signal Airplane mode Connected to a Wi Fi network Wired headset ...

Page 334: ...Icon Description Call in progress Call hold Speakerphone Phone microphone is muted Missed call Icon Description Bluetooth is on System warning Alarm is set New voicemail Ringer is silenced Your Home screen ...

Page 335: ...n NFC is on Vibrate mode Battery fully charged Battery is charging Phone is connected to PC via USB cable Icon Description Downloading data Uploading data GPS is acquiring Receiving location data from GPS Data is syncing ...

Page 336: ...cription New Gmail New Google Talk message New message Song is playing USB tethering is active Icon Description Portable Wi Fi hotspot is active Both USB tethering and portable hotspot are active Your Home screen ...

Page 337: ...Tap once to capitalise the next letter you type Double tap for all caps Tap to switch to the numbers and symbols keyboard You can also touch and hold this tab to view the Settings menu Tap to enter a space Tap to create a new line in the message field Tap to delete the previous character Entering accented letters When you select French or Spanish as the text entry language you can enter special Fr...

Page 338: ...52 a key until the zoom in key grows bigger and displays characters from different languages Then select the special character you want Your Home screen ...

Page 339: ...ct New to create a new account If you have a Google account touch Existing enter your email address and password then touch Sign in Once you have set up your Google account on your phone your phone automatically synchronises with your Google account on the web Your contacts Gmail messages Calendar events and other information from these applications and services on the web are synchronised with yo...

Page 340: ...en and you can simply connect to them Others are hidden or use security features you must configure your phone to be able to connect to them Turn off Wi Fi when you re not using it to extend the life of your battery NOTE If you are out of the Wi Fi zone or set Wi Fi to OFF additional charges may be applied by your mobile operator for mobile data use Turning Wi Fi on and connecting to a Wi Fi netwo...

Page 341: ...onnect to it If the network is secured you are prompted to enter a password or other credentials Ask your network administrator for details 5 After connecting to a Wi Fi network the status bar displays icon that indicate Wi Fi status Bluetooth You can use Bluetooth to send data by running a corresponding application as on most other mobile phones ...

Page 342: ...the device Please check the device s settings with their service provider Turning on Bluetooth and pairing up your phone with a Bluetooth device You must pair your device with another device before you connect to it 1 Touch Apps tab Settings Set Bluetooth to ON from the WIRELESS NETWORKS 2 Tap Bluetooth menu again Your phone will scan for and display the IDs of all available Bluetooth in range dev...

Page 343: ... send data to from the list Sharing your phone s data connection USB tethering and portable Wi Fi hotspot are great features when there are no wireless connections available You can share your phone s mobile data connection with a single computer via a USB cable USB tethering You can also share your phone s data connection with more than a single device at a time by turning your phone into a porta...

Page 344: ...oose options that you want to adjust TIP If your computer is running Windows 7 or a recent distribution of some flavours of Linux such as Ubuntu you don t usually need to prepare your computer for tethering But if you re running an earlier version of Windows or another operating system you may need to prepare your computer to establish a network connection via USB For the most current information ...

Page 345: ...Configure Wi Fi hotspot The Configure Wi Fi hotspot dialog box will open You can change the network SSID name that other computers or devices see when scanning for Wi Fi networks You can also touch the Security menu to configure the network with Wi Fi Protected Access 2 WPA2 security using a pre shared key PSK If you touch the WPA2 PSK security option a password field is added to the Configure Wi F...

Page 346: ...d To avoid unauthorised usage you are advised to keep the security option active Using the Wi Fi Cast You can share your music picture and video content between users who use Android Phones connected via the same Wi Fi Wi Fi Direct network Check your Wi Fi Wi Fi Direct network in advance and make sure the users are connected to the same network 1 Touch Apps tab Settings More from the WIRELESS NETW...

Page 347: ...can select a specific device to share multimedia data through SmartShare Wi Fi Direct cannot be enabled while using other Wi Fi functions 1 Touch Apps tab Settings More from the WIRELESS NETWORKS Wi Fi Direct 2 Select a device to connect from the scanned device list CREATE GROUP Touch to activate group owner mode which enables the legacy Wi Fi devices to connect by scanning your phone In this case...

Page 348: ...ata charges with your network provider Using SmartShare SmartShare uses DLNA Digital Living Network Alliance technology to share digital content through a wireless network Both devices must be DLNA certified to support this feature To turn SmartShare on and allow sharing contents 1 Touch Apps tab SmartShare 2 Touch the Menu key Settings 3 Touch Discoverable to allow your device to be detected by o...

Page 349: ... share Choose from Pictures Videos and Music 5 SmartShare is now activated and ready to share contents To control your renderer devices Let your renderer device e g TV play multimedia contents from your remote content library e g PC NOTE Make sure that the DLNA functionality of your devices is properly configured e g TV and PC 1 Touch Apps tab SmartShare 2 Touch the To button and select the device...

Page 350: ... renderer device e g TV NOTE Make sure that your renderer device is properly configured 1 While watching your pictures or videos using the Gallery application touch tab on the Title area Need to be connected network Select the device on network Currently the content is being shared through SmartShare 2 Select the device from renderer lists to play the files Connecting to Networks and Devices ...

Page 351: ... not appear in the renderer device list Your device might not be able to play some contents To download contents from the remote content library 1 Touch Apps tab SmartShare 2 Touch the From button and select the device of the remote content library 3 You can browse the content library 4 Touch and hold a content thumbnail and then touch Download NOTICE A few types of contents are not supported ...

Page 352: ...rtShare 2 Touch the From button and select My phone 3 You can browse the local content library 4 Touch and hold a content thumbnail and then touch Upload 5 Select the device of the remote content library to be uploaded NOTICE Some DLNA enabled devices do not support the DMS upload functionality and will not upload files A few types of contents are not supported Connecting to Networks and Devices ...

Page 353: ... touch and hold Calling your contacts 1 Touch to open your contacts 2 Scroll through the contact list or enter the first few letters of the contact you want to call by touching Search contacts 3 In the list touch the contact twice or touch you want to call Answering and rejecting a call When you receive a call in Lock state hold and slide the to Answer incoming call Hold and slide the to Decline an...

Page 354: ...own keys on the left hand side of the phone Making a second call 1 During your first call touch Menu Add call and dial the number Also you can go recent dialled list by touching or can search contacts by touching and select the contact you want to call 2 Touch to make the call 3 Both calls are displayed on the call screen Your initial call is locked and put on hold 4 Touch the displayed number to t...

Page 355: ... choose the Call logs tab View a complete list of all dialled received and missed calls TIP Touch any call log entry to view the date time and duration of the call TIP Press the Menu key then touch Delete all to delete all the recorded items Call settings You can configure phone call settings such as call forwarding and other special features offered by your carrier ...

Page 356: ...you to select your carrier s voicemail service Voicemail settings If you are using your carrier s voicemail service this option allows you to enter the voicemail number to use for listening to and managing your voicemail Save unknown numbers Add unknown numbers to contacts after a call Call reject Allows you to set the call reject function Choose from Disabled Reject calls on list or Reject all ca...

Page 357: ...ew the duration of calls including Last call All calls Dialled calls and received calls Call costs View the charges applied to your calls This service is network dependent some operators do not support this function Additional settings This lets you change the following settings Caller ID Choose whether to display your number on an outgoing call Call waiting If call waiting is activated the handse...

Page 358: ... using the keyboard Adding a new contact 1 Touch enter the new contact s number then press the Menu key Touch Add to Contacts Create new contact 2 If you want to add a picture to the new contact touch the image area Choose from Take photo or Select from Gallery 3 Select the contact type by touching 4 Touch a category of contact information and enter the details about your contact 5 Touch Save Favo...

Page 359: ...h the yellow color star to the right of the contact s name The star turns grey and the contact is removed from your favourites Moving contacts from your Old Device to your New Device Export your contacts as a CSV file from your old device to your PC using a PC sync program 1 Install LG PC Suite on the PC first Run the program and connect your Android mobile phone to the PC using a USB cable 2 On th...

Page 360: ...rt in Windows Explorer and click the Open 6 Click OK 7 A Field mapping popup to link the contacts in your device and new contacts data will appear 8 If there is a conflict between the data in your PC contacts and device contacts make the necessary selections or modifications in LG PC Suite 9 Click OK Contacts ...

Page 361: ...er the contact name matching contacts appear You can touch a suggested recipient You can add multiple contacts NOTE You will be charged for a text message for every person you send the message to 3 Touch Enter message field and start to compose your message 4 Press to open the Options menu Choose from Add subject Discard Insert smiley and All messages TIP You can touch icon to attach the file you w...

Page 362: ...ntry to country depending on the language and how the SMS is coded WARNING If an image video or audio file is added to an SMS message it is automatically converted into an MMS message and you are charged accordingly Threaded box Messages SMS MMS exchanged with another party can be displayed in chronological order so that you can conveniently see an overview of your conversation Messaging ...

Page 363: ...the Menu key then choose Insert smiley Changing your message settings Your LG P895 message settings are predefined so you can send messages immediately You can change the settings based on your preferences 1 Touch Messaging icon on the home screen and touch the Menu key then tap Settings ...

Page 364: ...ou open the E mail application a setup wizard opens to help you to set up an email account To add another email account Touch Apps tab E mail in the account screen touch Add account After the initial setup Email displays the contents of your inbox If you have added more than one account you can switch among accounts To change an email account s setting Touch Apps tab E mail in the account screen t...

Page 365: ...ges sent to all of your accounts Messages in the Combined Inbox are colour coded on the left by account using the same colours used for your accounts in the Accounts screen Touch the folder icon to open the account folders TIP If you long press an account from the list of email accounts you can select the desired option in the pop up window For example select Add to home screen to create a shortcu...

Page 366: ...age s intended recipient As you enter text matching addresses are offered from your Contacts Separate multiple addresses with semicolon 3 Touch Cc Bcc field to add Cc Bcc and Touch to attach files if required 4 Enter the text of the message 5 Touch the If you aren t connected to a network for example if you re working in airplane mode the messages that you send are stored in your Outbox folder until...

Page 367: ...81 TIP When a new email arrives in the inbox you will receive a notification by sound or vibration Tap the email notification to stop notifications ...

Page 368: ...e catch shot Touch this icon to capture the missing moment before pressing the shutter Shot mode Choose from Normal HDR Panorama or Continuous shot Settings Touch this icon to open the Settings menu Video mode Touch this icon to switch to video mode Taking a photo Gallery Touch to view the last photo you captured This enables you to access your gallery and view saved photos within camera mode ...

Page 369: ...ubject 5 Click on the to capture the photo Once you ve taken the photo Touch to view the last photo you captured Touch to share your photo via Bluetooth E mail Gmail Google Memo Messaging Picasa and Social TIP If you have an SNS account and set it up on your phone you can share your photo with the SNS community Touch to delete the photo Touch to open the options Set image as Touch to use the photo...

Page 370: ...solution If you choose the high resolution the file size will increase which means you will be able to store fewer photos in the memory Improves colour qualities in different lighting conditions Applies artistic effects to the pictures Applies the additional options for pictures Slideshow Automatically shows you the images one after the other Details Show the picture information Using the advanced...

Page 371: ...flash when taking a photo in dark conditions Zoom in or out This defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the photo Focuses on the specific spot Select the photo resolution If you choose the high resolution the file size will increase which means you will be able to store fewer photos in the memory Finds the color and light settings appropriate for the current environment Choose from N...

Page 372: ...Activate to use your phone s location based services Take pictures wherever you are and tag them with the location If you upload tagged pictures to a blog that supports geotagging you can see the pictures displayed on a map NOTE This function is only available when GPS is active Select one of shutter sounds It automatically shows you the picture you just took Restore all camera default settings To...

Page 373: ...ch as white balance colour tone timer and shot mode Check these before you take your next photo TIP The Settings menu is superimposed over the viewfinder so when you change elements of the photo colour or quality you see a preview of the image change behind the Settings menu ...

Page 374: ...ontrols the amount of sunlight entering the video Live effect Live effect provides various visual effects when taking a video Settings Touch this icon to open the settings menu Camera mode Touch this icon to switch to camera mode Start recording Gallery Touch to view the last video you recorded This enables you to access your gallery and view your saved videos from within video mode ...

Page 375: ...d button once to start recording 5 A red light appears at the top corner of the viewfinder with a timer showing the length of the video Tip Touch to capture image during recording a video 6 Touch on the screen to stop recording After shooting a video Your captured video will appear on the Gallery Touch to view the last video you recorded Touch to play the video Touch to share the video via Bluetoot...

Page 376: ...a detailed information such as the name date time size and type Using the advanced settings Using the viewfinder touch to open all the advanced options Touch if you want to change the viewfinder menu Switch between the rear facing camera lens and the front facing camera lens Zoom in or zoom out This defines and controls the amount of sunlight entering the video Provides various visual effects when...

Page 377: ... Activate to use your phone s location based services Choose Off to record a video without sound Auto review automatically shows you the video you just recorded Restore all video camera default settings Touch if you want to know how this function operates This provides you with a quick guide Adjusting the volume when viewing a video To adjust the volume of a video while it is playing use the volum...

Page 378: ...92 You can make your own movie using your images video and music 1 From the Home Screen touch the Apps Key Video Wiz 2 Select the desired options to create a movie Video Wiz ...

Page 379: ...uch this icon to remove the selected image s and or video s Touch an image or video in the added media contents section touch Delete Media then touch Delete selected or Delete all Add Style Touch this icon to select the desired movie style Touch the up or down arrow to scroll through and select the style you want Added image video Displays all of the selected image s and or video s for your movie ...

Page 380: ...rt selected graphic s Touch the Trim Video icon to trim segments from your video footage Touch the Done icon to exit when you re finished editing Add Music Touch this button to set the background music Preview Touch this icon to play your movie Help Touch this icon to view information on how to use the Video Wiz application Video Wiz ...

Page 381: ...er that lets you play all your favourite videos To access the video player Touch Apps tab Video Player Playing a video 1 In the home screen touch Apps tab Video Player 2 Select the video you want to play Touch to pause playback a video Touch to resume playback a video Touch to go 10 seconds forward Touch to go 10 seconds backward Touch to manage the video volume ...

Page 382: ...e the content with a preview screen Touch to lock a video screen Touch the direct list icon to see the list of videos To change the volume while watching video press the up and down volume keys on the right hand side of the phone Touch and hold any video in the list It displays Delete and Details as options Gallery Touch Apps tab Gallery Open a list of catalogue bars that store all your multimedia...

Page 383: ...e LG P895 to a PC using a USB cable 2 If you haven t installed LG Android Platform Driver on your PC you need to change the settings manually Choose Settings Connectivity USB connection type then select Media sync MTP 3 You can view the mass storage content on your PC and transfer the files Playing a song 1 In the Home screen touch Apps tab Music Player 2 Touch Songs 3 Select the song you want to p...

Page 384: ... Touch to set repeat mode Touch to set shuffle mode Touch to see the current playlist Touch to see lyrics This option is on only if the song includes the lyrics To change the volume while listening to music press the up and down volume keys on the right hand side of the phone Touch and hold any song in the list It displays Play Add to playlist Set as ringtone Delete Share Search and Details Multim...

Page 385: ...ial Before downloading or copying the file check the national laws of the relevant country concerning the use of such material LG Tag What is LG Tag LG Tag allows easy saving and loading to NFC tag which can be customized to suit certain environments Using Tag writing 1 Touch Apps tab LG Tag 2 Select the desired mode Car Office Sleep User mode and tap Write on NFC tag 3 Touch the back of your devic...

Page 386: ...e desired function among of videos photos music Setting media home 1 Touch Apps tab Media Home Settings 2 You can change the settings based on your preferences Tip Once you connect your device to a TV or monitor via a MHL cable media home apps will be launch automatically when Media Home Settings Auto launch and auto off option is enabled Multimedia ...

Page 387: ...can manage and personalize a wide variety of information Making a note 1 Touch Apps tab Notebook 2 Touch New note to create a new note 3 Select the desired mode Cover Title Paper Paper colour and OK Getting to know the Notebook Notebook ...

Page 388: ...ed Touch to attach the files using Picture Capture picture Video Capture video Audio Record voice Location Sticker and Date and time Share the current note to others via Gmail E mail Social Bluetooth Messaging Picasa Google Memo Save the note with the current screen Select to lock or unlock the Front key Tap this button to enlarge the input area Notebook ...

Page 389: ...ch Apps tab Tap the icon to access LG SmartWorld 2 Tap Sign in and enter ID PW for LG SmartWorld If you have not yet signed up tap Register and get a LG SmartWorld membership 3 Download the content you want NOTE What if there is no icon 1 Using a mobile Web browser access LG SmartWorld www lgworld com and select your country 2 Download LG SmartWorld App 3 Execute and install the downloaded file 4 ...

Page 390: ...downloaded to be updated contents Try the easy Menu buttons to find what you re looking for fast Apps for you Recommended content based on your previous choices Settings Set Profile and Display Sign in Set your ID and Password Try other useful functions as well Content Detail screen NOTE LG SmartWorld may not be available in all carriers or countries LG SmartWorld ...

Page 391: ...d Puzzle lock and Memo Touch Save NOTE To change alarm settings on alarm list screen touch the Menu key and select Settings You can adjust the below options Alarm in silent mode Alarm volume Side button behavior and Puzzle lock option Using your calculator 1 Touch Apps tab Calculator 2 Touch the number keys to enter numbers 3 For simple calculations touch the function you want x or followed by Uti...

Page 392: ... Calendar Day Week Month Agenda 3 Tap on the date you want to add event on and touch 4 Touch Event name then enter the event name 5 Touch Location and enter the location Check the date and enter the time you want your event to start and finish 6 If you want to add a note to your event touch Description and enter the details 7 If you want to repeat the alarm set REPEAT and set REMINDERS if necessary...

Page 393: ...l address and Password 4 Make sure if you checkmark Sync task Polaris Office Polaris Office is a professional mobile office solution that lets users conveniently view various types of office documents including Word Excel and PowerPoint files anywhere anytime using their mobile devices Touch Apps tab Polaris Office Managing files Polaris Office provides mobile users with convenient file management...

Page 394: ... to share files from your phone 1 Touch FileShare 2 Choose the types of content you would like to share Choose from Images Videos Music and Document Backup About backing up and restoring smart phone data It recommends that you regularly create and save a backup file on the Internal Storage especially before you update any software Maintaining a current backup file on Storage memory might allow you...

Page 395: ...estore on your smart phone you can back up and restore most of your smart phone data Applications including unprotected applications their settings Applications Downloaded Applications Pre installed Bookmarks Calendar Call log Contacts Home screen Messages and System settings using this application To perform a manual backup of your smart phone data To schedule automatic backups of your smart phon...

Page 396: ...ed files backed up you will see the message Done and select Continue to finish backing up data Scheduling automatic backups You can also enable automatic backups of the data on your smart phone according to your schedule setting To do this complete the following steps 1 Touch Apps tab and then select Backup Schedule 2 On the Scheduled Backup Location screen touch Internal Storage 3 From the list sel...

Page 397: ...rt phone are deleted before the backup file is restored 1 Touch Apps tab and then select Backup Restore Internal Storage 2 On the Restore screen select a backup file that contains the data you want to restore 3 Select the check box next to the item you want to restore and then select Continue to restore to phone NOTE Please note that your phone data will be overwritten with the contents of your bac...

Page 398: ...p Application cannot be functioned Select Charge only option when the USB cable is connected You can set Enable encryption to encrypt your backup files for extra protection Press the Menu from the Backup screen and select Settings Security Enable encryption and select the check box To restore synchronised organizer data you must have an activation password ...

Page 399: ... enable automatic delete old backups and only keep the most recent backup Press the Menu from the Backup screen and select Settings Scheduled backup Auto delete old backups to select the number of scheduled backups to keep ...

Page 400: ...services and downloading content Check data charges with your network provider Using the web toolbar Touch to go back a page Touch to go forward a page to the page you connected to after the current one This is the opposite of what happens when you press the Back key which goes to the previous page While holding down the icon tilt the device toward body to zoom in or reverse to zoom out Touch to a...

Page 401: ...the web page with others via Bluetooth E mail Gmail Google Messaging Social Find on page Allows you to find letters or words on the current web page Request desktop site Allows you to view the web page as desktop Save for offline reading Save current page to read it during offline Brightness Modify viewing brightness for comfortable web browsing Settings Displays Browser settings Exit Exit from th...

Page 402: ...o airplane mode Wi Fi Wi Fi Turns on Wi Fi to connect to available Wi Fi networks TIP How to obtain the MAC address To set up a connection in some wireless networks with MAC filters you may need to enter the MAC address of your LG P895 into the router You can find the MAC address in the following user interface Touch Apps tab Settings Wi Fi Advanced MAC address ...

Page 403: ...ching to airplane mode all wireless connections are disabled Wi Fi Direct Make a connection directly with Wi Fi devices without any Access Point Portable Wi Fi hotspot Allows you to share mobile network via Wi Fi and you can configure the portable Wi Fi hotspot settings NFC Your LG P895 is NFC enabled mobile phone NFC Near Field Communication is a wireless connectivity technology that enables two ...

Page 404: ... with your finger then select the NFC icon to turn it on NOTE When the Airplane mode is activated NFC application can be used Using NFC To use NFC make sure your device is switched on and activate the NFC if disabled Android Beam You can beam a web page a video or other content from your screen to another device by bringing the devices together typically back to back NOTE Make sure both devices ar...

Page 405: ... NOTE You must set a lock screen PIN or password before you can use credential storage DEVICE Sound Sound profile You can choose the Sound Vibrate only or Silent Volumes You can manage the volume of Phone Ringtone Notification sound Touch feedback system Music video games and other media Alarms Phone ringtone Allows you to set your default incoming call ringtone Notification sound Allows you to se...

Page 406: ...ons icons and other onscreen items that react to your touch Screen lock sound Allows you to set your phone to play a sound when locking and unlocking the screen Vibrate on touch Allows you to set the vibration feedback for phone screen touch Display Brightness Adjust the screen brightness Auto rotate screen Set to switch orientation automatically when you rotate the phone Screen timeout Set the ti...

Page 407: ...Scroll screens circularly and Home backup restore Lock screen Select screen lock Set a screen lock type to secure your phone Opens a set of screens that guide you through drawing a screen unlock pattern You can set among of None Swipe Face Unlock Pattern PIN Password If you have enabled Pattern lock type then When you turn on your phone or wake up the screen you re asked to draw your unlock patter...

Page 408: ... applications Tilt sensitivity Test and adjust sensitivity of tilt sensor for home screen and applications Silence incoming calls Flip device to mute incoming call Snooze or stop alarm Flip device to snooze or stop alarm Pause video Flip device to pause playing video Help Help for gesture functions Storage INTERNAL STORAGE View the internal storage usage Power saver Here you can manage the battery...

Page 409: ...ice If you select Google s location service your phone determines your approximate location using Wi Fi and mobile networks When you select this option you re asked whether you consent to allowing Google to use your location when providing these services GPS satellites If you select GPS satellites your phone determines your location to street level accuracy Location Google search If you select Goo...

Page 410: ...ates Install from storage Choose to install encrypted certificates Clear credentials Remove all certificates Language input Use the Language input settings to select the language for the text on your phone and for configuring the on screen keyboard including words you ve added to its dictionary Backup reset Change the settings for managing your settings and data Back up my data Set to back up your...

Page 411: ...rmation as when you first started Android SYSTEM Date time Use Date time settings to set how dates are displayed You can also use these settings to set your own time and time zone rather than obtaining the current time from the mobile network Accessibility Use the Accessibility settings to configure accessibility plug ins you have installed on your phone NOTE Requires additional plug ins to become...

Page 412: ...nnection Please note that Wi Fi network should be connected for LG PC Suite via Wi Fi connection from the WIRELESS NETWORKS About phone View legal information and check phone status and software version Phone software update LG Mobile phone software update from the Internet For more information about using this function please visit http update lgmobile com or http www lg com common index jsp sele...

Page 413: ...fore proceeding Please note that removing the USB data cable during the upgrade may seriously damage your mobile phone NOTE LG reserves the right to make firmware updates available only for selected models at its own discretion and does not guarantee the availability of the newer version of the firmware for all handset models LG Mobile Phone software update via Over the Air OTA This feature allows...

Page 414: ...when the time is up You can also rearrange an update manually NOTE Your personal data from internal phone storage including information about your Google account and any other accounts your system application data and settings any downloaded applications and your DRM licence might be lost in the process of updating your phone s software Therefore LG recommends that you back up your personal data b...

Page 415: ...ert your files into DivX videos ABOUT DIVX VIDEO ON DEMAND This DivX Certified device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video on Demand VOD movies To obtain your registration code locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu Go to vod divx com for more information on how to complete your registration DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p including premium conten...

Page 416: ...sued pending DTS the Symbol DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks DTS 2 0 Digital Out is a trademark of DTS Inc Product includes software DTS Inc All Rights Reserved Dolby Mobile Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Settings ...

Page 417: ...een Phone preferences Exits the On Screen Phone programme Maximises the On Screen Phone window Minimize the On Screen Phone window On Screen Phone features Real time transfer and control displays and controls your mobile phone screen when connected to your PC Mouse control allows you to control your mobile phone by using the mouse to click and drag on your PC screen Text input with keyboard allows...

Page 418: ...hone Just select the files you wish to transfer and drag and drop them into the On Screen Phone window The files sent are stored in internal SD card Real time event notifications prompts a pop up to inform you of any incoming calls or text multimedia messages How to install On Screen Phone on your PC 1 Visit LG Home www lg com and select a country of your choice 2 Go to Support Mobile Phone Suppor...

Page 419: ...ies are available for use with the LG P895 Items described below may be optional Travel adaptor Stereo headset Micro USIM Slot Pin Data cable Connect your LG P895 and PC User Guide Learn more about your LG P895 LG Tag Rubberdium Pen ...

Page 420: ...ries may vary in different regions Notice You can use more convenient if you are use the Rubberdium Pen for home screen touch However the bottom button back home recently apps menu button is not run to Rubberdium Pen Please use your finger directly WARNING Do not touch strongly and rub such as sharp edges ...

Page 421: ...hone Some problems require you to call your service provider but most are easy to fix yourself Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Micro USIM error There is no Micro USIM card in the phone or it is inserted incorrectly Make sure that the Micro USIM card is correctly inserted ...

Page 422: ...outside the carrier network Move towards a window or into an open area Check the network operator coverage map Operator applied new services Check whether the Micro USIM card is more than 6 12 months old If so change your Micro USIM at your network provider s nearest branch Contact your service provider Troubleshooting ...

Page 423: ...a security code you will need to confirm the new code by re entering it If you forget the code contact your service provider The two codes you have entered do not match Any application cannot be set Not supported by service provider or registration required Contact your service provider ...

Page 424: ... USIM card inserted Check for new restrictions Pre paid charge limit reached Contact service provider or reset limit with PIN2 Phone cannot be switched on On Off key pressed too briefly Press the On Off key down for at least two seconds Battery is not charged Charge battery Check charging indicator on the display Troubleshooting ...

Page 425: ...arge battery Outside temperature is too hot or cold Make sure phone is charging at a normal temperature Contact problem Check the charger and connection to the phone No voltage Plug the charger into a different socket Charger defective Replace charger Wrong charger Only use original LG accessories ...

Page 426: ...The Fixed dialling number function is on Check the Settings menu and turn the function off Impossible to receive send SMS picture Memory full Delete some messages from the phone Files not opening Unsupported file format Check the file formats that can be supported Troubleshooting ...

Page 427: ...roximity sensor problem If you use any protection tape or case check to see if it has covered the area around the proximity sensor Make sure that the area around the proximity sensor is clean No sound Vibration mode Check the settings status of the sound menu to make sure you are not in vibrate or silent mode ...

Page 428: ...142 Message Possible causes Possible corrective measures Hang up or freeze Intermittent software problem Try to perform a software update via the website Troubleshooting ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for P895

Samsung Galaxy TAB4 Manual preview
Galaxy TAB4
Brand: Samsung Pages: 38
KARBONN K65 Manual preview
K65
Brand: KARBONN Pages: 18
KARBONN A5s Quick Start Up Manual preview
A5s
Brand: KARBONN Pages: 12
Kantronics KPC-3 Plus User Manual preview
KPC-3 Plus
Brand: Kantronics Pages: 260
Audiovox CDM 8900 Owner'S Manual preview
CDM 8900
Brand: Audiovox Pages: 137
Hanlong UC860(P) User Manual preview
UC860(P)
Brand: Hanlong Pages: 68
Mio DigiWalker A701 User Manual preview
DigiWalker A701
Brand: Mio Pages: 168
Megacom Pocket Dual Catchmon User Manual preview
Pocket Dual Catchmon
Brand: Megacom Pages: 2
Aastra SIP SIP9133i User Manual preview
SIP SIP9133i
Brand: Aastra Pages: 22
UMI ROME X Users Manual And Important Safety Information preview
ROME X
Brand: UMI Pages: 44
EMPORIA CLASSIC 2G Manual preview
CLASSIC 2G
Brand: EMPORIA Pages: 24
Sprint PCS CDM9155SP Getting To Know Manual preview
CDM9155SP
Brand: Sprint PCS Pages: 145
Maxcom MM821 Manual preview
MM821
Brand: Maxcom Pages: 46
Teldat elmeg IP130 User Manual preview
elmeg IP130
Brand: Teldat Pages: 165
Kosher FIG FLIP User Manual preview
FIG FLIP
Brand: Kosher Pages: 19
MOB MO9405 User Manual preview
MO9405
Brand: MOB Pages: 4
Alcatel-Lucent OmniTouch 8082 User Manual preview
OmniTouch 8082
Brand: Alcatel-Lucent Pages: 60
Verizon WP8990 Zephyr User Manual preview
WP8990 Zephyr
Brand: Verizon Pages: 10

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands